JP7040570B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operating means to change the production of the game. Has been done.

In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is one that executes a lottery that changes the effect of the game when the operation means is operated in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741

In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage by using an operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a determination means for executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means, and the identification information on the display means. The dynamic display mode determining means for dynamically displaying the identification information, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the determination result are predetermined results. It has a specific game execution means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is displayed on the display means, and the identification information is not dynamically displayed during the period. Therefore, when the period is outside the predetermined specific period, the first effect is executed in which the execution is stopped during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed. The effect executing means for executing the second effect, which is continued during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the player, within the predetermined specific period. The identification is executed after the operation means is operated and the operation means is operated when the second effect is executed during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed. It has a setting means for setting the information to be reflected in the game during the period when the information is dynamically displayed, and the operation display mode is based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means. Is displayed on the display means, and in the operation display mode, setting display information that can be selected corresponding to the operation of the operation means can be notified, and the setting means is the setting display information. Is set based on the fact that the operating means is operated during the period displayed on the display means .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. It is shown that the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the determination result are predetermined results. A specific game execution means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player when the identification information for the purpose is displayed on the display means, and a predetermined period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed. When the specified period is outside the specified period, the first effect is executed and the execution is stopped during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed. An effect executing means for executing a second effect whose execution is continued during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed within a predetermined specific period, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. And, during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, the operation means is operated when the second effect is executed, and the identification information executed after that is dynamically displayed. It has a setting means for setting to be reflected in the game during the period of time, and the operation display mode is changed to the display means based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means. In the operation display mode that is displayed, the setting display information that can be selected in response to the operation of the operation means can be notified, and in the setting means, the setting display information is transmitted to the display means. It is set based on the fact that the operating means is operated during the displayed period .

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button and a touch sensor, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch. (A) is an example of a display mode showing a case where the ticket displayed on the third symbol display device can be used, and (b) is a hold for displaying a look-ahead notification using the ticket to indicate a hit. It is a figure which showed an example which changed to the display mode of a symbol. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW notice displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device during the time production period. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a touch sensor displayed by the third symbol display device is used during the time effect period. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the main control device. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the main controller, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the main controller. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal hit random number table in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device schematically. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table A which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table B which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table C which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table D which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the SW notice selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the touch effect lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronization effect management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ticket processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the special SW effect control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the touch effect selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) to (b) are timing charts when the SW notice of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is set. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the comment notice in the SW notice of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the comment notice in the character notice of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the re-variation notice in the SW notice of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the SW number selection table in the 2nd Embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the SW notice selection table in the case of the progress mode A in the second embodiment, and (b) is the case of the progress mode D in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the SW notice selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the SW effect control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timing chart about the example of SW notice in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing a timing chart for an example of SW notice in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing a display mode for an example of SW notice in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when the frame button is started to be pressed before the normal pressing start timing for the SW notice in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the long-press lottery table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the SW effect control process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22, a touch sensor 290, and a selection switch 291 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The selection switches 291 are provided side by side on the right side of the frame button 22 when viewed from the front side.

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the content of the advance notice effect. To. Further, in the touch sensor 290, for example, the display content of the dedicated effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is based on the operation of the player's touch sensor 290. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as, for example, a switch for driving a driving accessory provided in the gaming machine. The frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 5, but the touch switch 290 is arranged close to the front side of the gaming machine of the frame button 22, and is usually a player. When the frame button 22 is pressed (operated), the touch switch is arranged at a position where the player's hand can react.

Further, the selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22, and is composed of a left selection switch 291L and a right selection switch 291R. The selection switch 291 is used to move the cursor or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to select the displayed option.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the electric accessory 64c, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the starting port 64, and a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Will be done. In the lottery of the special symbol (hereinafter, the special symbol is referred to as a special symbol) performed for the ball entering the starting port 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined and the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, waits for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won a prize. ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first starting port 64a while the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. than the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, the player is usually configured to play the game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the starting port 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is started. To.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the starting port 64 is in an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the entry port on both sides of the entry port into which the game ball enters, and the entry into the entry port is restricted. It has an electric accessory 64c provided with a rotatable blade member in a closed state. The electric accessory 64c is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (winning) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, the game ball is held in an upright position so as to prevent the game ball from entering from both sides of the ball entry port, and the game ball is prevented from entering from between the blade members. , The starting port 64 is arranged. Therefore, the starting port 64 is usually configured to easily enter the ball when the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state.

The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the starting opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the starting opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the starting port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate 67, the hit / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. There are two types of hits for normal symbols: normal hits and long-time hits in which the opening time and the number of times of opening increase, respectively, as compared with the normal hits. When the normal symbol hits normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the starting port 64 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and a ball enters the starting port 64. It becomes easy to ball. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the starting port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. To.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", as an added value after the end of the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit to the start of the big hit game of the next special symbol ( Move to (during probabilistic change of special design). On the other hand, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly increased and set.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which is the state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the normal state. (Normal state or low probability game state of special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium or time saving game state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the starting port 64. .. On the other hand, the time when it is not the "normal state of the normal symbol" is called the "normal state of the normal symbol" (normal game state), and this is the state where the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during the time reduction. Indicates that. Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability change period of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the period from the end of the "big hit A" to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period, but the period is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 20). The period during which the lottery of the special symbol (such as times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both "big hit A" and "big hit B" may be configured to have a predetermined number of times and a probability variation period. Further, the probability change period may be a probability change period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

In addition, while the "high probability state of the special symbol" is continued, if the special symbol becomes a big hit and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the "high probability state of the special symbol" is further changed. It will continue from the end of the big hit of the new special symbol to the start of the next big hit game.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display the fluctuation by indicating whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry into the starting port 64 (starting prize) is being executed by the lighting state, or after the fluctuation is completed. As a stop symbol, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown depending on the lighting state, or the ball entered in the start opening 64 changes. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the starting port 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, respectively. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the starting port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holding times is not limited to 4 times, and is 3 times or less, or. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the starting port 64 (starting prize), the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed in the first symbol display device 37 in response to the entering opening. To. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", and the main symbol with an odd number (1,3,5,7,9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the starting port 64, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are. , This is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be given, such as by issuing it.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the starting port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 may be variably displayed as a symbol having only numbers attached to the symbol in the case of super reach or the like. The display area Dm may be enlarged and the display area of the small display area Ds may disappear. With this configuration, it is possible to display a fresh display mode to the player.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and 3 times or less. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 5, the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, and the selection switch 293 provided on the upper plate 17 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a frame button 22 and a touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing portion pressed by the player, and the limit type switch is turned on when the pressing portion is pressed downward by a predetermined amount. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this embodiment), determines that the frame button 22 is "ON" from the "OFF" state, and sets it to "ON" even at the next interval. If it is determined, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the frame button 22 is mistakenly determined to have been pressed when the frame button 22 is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like. Further, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed, that is, the state of "ON" is switched to the state of "OFF", and it is determined to be "OFF" in the next monitoring, the frame button 22 is pressed. Determine that it has been released.

The touch sensor 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 and the front side. The touch sensor 290 has a sensor unit arranged substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and is configured to emit infrared rays from the sensor unit and turn on when the infrared rays hit an object and identify the reflected infrared rays. There is. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing his or her hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch sensor 290 to a predetermined distance. In order to turn on the touch sensor 290, the operation of bringing a hand or the like closer to the sensor unit is called operating the touch sensor 290.

Further, as with the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the touch sensor 290 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this embodiment), and the state determined to be "OFF" is then changed to the "ON" state. Then, when it is further determined to be "ON", it is determined that the touch sensor 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The characters "touch" are shown on the upper surface of the sensor unit of the touch sensor 290 so that the player can easily recognize that the touch sensor 290 is arranged.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a selection switch 293. The selection switch 293 is arranged close to the left side of the frame button 22. The selection switch 293 is composed of a push-type switch like the frame button 22, and a character indicating which direction is selected is displayed on the upper surface thereof. The selection switch 293 is mainly used when the player wants to move the cursor displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an arbitrary direction. The selection switch 293 is composed of a left selection switch 293L for instructing the left direction and a right selection switch 203R. A signal for turning on each switch is output to the voice lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

The ticket production will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the frame is set during the pre-reading period of the normal production period (mode A) (when the number of tickets described later is 1 or more, the reserved number of special symbols is stored, and the jackpot game is not in progress). By pressing the button 22, it is possible to notify whether or not a special symbol holding ball stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored with a hit / fail determination result of a big hit. During the look-ahead period, as shown in FIG. 6A, one ticket stored by pressing and holding the frame button 22 (pressed for 3 seconds) in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hit / fail determination result of the hold currently stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a.

FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a display mode when the frame button 22 is pressed and held for a long time to notify the result of the hit / miss determination of the reserved item. In the small area Ds3, the characters "Results are being announced !!" are displayed, indicating that the winning / failing determination result corresponding to the reserved symbol is being notified. The number of tickets displayed below it is displayed by subtracting one from the case of FIG. 6A. In the small area Ds2, the characters "Chance !!" are displayed instead of the character's notice symbol, and the player is notified that some of the reserved items are stored as big hits. is doing. Then, among the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2, the color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the big hit is variably displayed.

With this configuration, the player can use the ticket acquired as a privilege of the production to know the result of the winning / failing determination of the reserved item before the variable display ends. Therefore, when a player wants to leave his / her seat early in a toilet or the like, he / she can know the result of the hit / fail judgment earlier by using a ticket and decide whether or not to leave the seat according to the stored hit / fail judgment result. Can be decided early. Therefore, the effect of being given a ticket can be made to appeal to the player, and the game can be performed in an attempt to obtain benefits other than the jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the result of pre-reading notification using a ticket is described only by a big hit, but it is not limited to this, and if a hold that becomes a super reach is stored even if it is out of order, It may be notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode that is rarely selected. In addition, as the privilege given by using the ticket, other privilege, for example, by displaying a two-dimensional code and reading it with a mobile phone or the like, predetermined image data can be obtained, predetermined music data, etc. May be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the display mode of the SW notice displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7A is a display mode for notifying the player to press the frame button 22 when the SW notice is selected. When the SW notice is selected, three symbols imitating the frame button 22 are displayed, and a meter indicating the effective time determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed below the symbols. This meter displays a variable color as the effective time decreases. As shown in FIG. 7A, the player is notified that the number of times the frame button 22 of the SW notice is pressed (the number of times the SW is pressed) is three times. The player can recognize that the player has the right to display the notice display mode one by one by pressing the frame button 22 three times.

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the symbol "pushA" is first variably displayed in the notice display mode. Next, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the symbol "pushB" is displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed next, the symbol "pushC" is variably displayed in the notice display mode.

As the notice display mode to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 7A, a display mode in which fish are blowing bubbles and a display mode in which a school of fish is displayed are displayed. Here, the details will be described later, but since each display mode is displayed based on the change of the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol, the player can easily select the hit / miss judgment result when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. The frame button 22 can be pressed with the expectation that the mode will not be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

It should be noted that the displayed display mode indicates whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuating special symbol is super reach, or notifies the content of the notice display mode displayed after this SW notice. You may.

In this way, the player can expect the big hit the second time even if the one with the low expectation for the big hit is selected by displaying the SW notice composed of the number of times of pressing multiple times. You can play the game with the expectation that something with a high degree will be displayed.

Further, the SW effective time may be set to be extremely short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the display contents of the SW notice set multiple times so that it cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, and the player feels nervous whether the SW notice is displayed. You can play the game with.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 9, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described. When 55 minutes have passed since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, a production that allows you to interact with the dog using the touch switch 290, which is called contact time, is displayed as a time production period (mode C) of 5 minutes. The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 8A instead of the display mode displayed in the normal effect period (mode A) (see FIG. 4B). The main display area Dm on which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, an effect of urging the player to display an effect of operating the touch center 290 to call the dog closer (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed in the lower left display area. The character "call" is displayed, and when the touch sensor 290 is operated, the player is notified that the effect of calling the dog is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b), when the touch sensor 290 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 8 (a), the dog is enlarged and displayed, and the effect of interacting with the dog is selected in the lower left. The word "Choose" is displayed, and the contents of the contact are shown at the bottom. A cursor indicated by a lower triangular pattern is displayed at the upper part of the contacting contents, indicating that the contents indicated by the cursors can be selected.

The player can move the cursor left and right by operating the selection switch 293. When the player presses the frame button 22, the touching content pointed to by the cursor is selected. In the present embodiment, the contents of contact are set to "stroke" and "brushing".

FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroking effect” mode that is displayed when the touching content of “stroking” is selected. The method of operating the touch sensor 290 is displayed in the lower left. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the "stroking effect", the touch sensor 290 is turned on (operated) by moving the hand around the frame button 22 by bringing the hand close to the distance where the touch sensor 290 can be turned on. Is urging. When the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the pattern imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed as if stroking the dog's head, and the dog's facial expression is variably displayed.

By doing so, the movement of the player's hand becomes as if he / she is stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he / she is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed at the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking motion to be notified so that the level rises. You will be notified to win a ticket when the indicator goes up to the maximum.

Further, as notified, the player operates the touch sensor 290 so that the touch sensor 290 can be configured to repeatedly turn on and off at predetermined intervals. When the touch sensor 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that the touch sensor 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms when operated quickly. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch sensor 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised (see FIG. 19 (b)). Therefore, the player who operates the touch sensor 290 quickly with the correct operation can give more benefits. Further, in this "stroking effect", the player who keeps the touch sensor 290 on all the time, that is, the player who just holds his hand over the touch sensor 290, is configured so that the level does not rise on the indicator. did. This can encourage you to play with the correct movement.

FIG. 9B shows a display mode of the “brushing effect” when the contact content of the “brushing” is selected. In the "brushing effect", a method of turning on (operating) the touch center 290 is displayed in the lower left of the display area. In the "brushing effect", the hand is brought close to the touch sensor 290 until the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the hand is moved to the upper part of the frame button 22, and the hand is reciprocated so as to return to the touch sensor 290 again. You will be notified to move your hand back and forth. Based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on, the pattern imitating the brush displayed on the dog's head is displayed variable back and forth, the brushing display mode is displayed, and the dog's facial expression is pleased. It is displayed in a variable manner.

By operating in this way, the touch sensor 290 is operated so as to repeat on and off at predetermined intervals. In the operation of "brushing effect", it is generally assumed that the touch sensor 290 is turned on at intervals of 150 ms to 200 ms when the operation is quick. Therefore, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on at 71 ms to 350 ms including the 151 ms to 200 ms, the level is most likely to rise (see FIG. 19 (b)).

As a result, more benefits can be given to the player who is operating the touch sensor 290 with the correct operation. Therefore, the player can operate the touch sensor 290 with a more correct operation.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variablely displays whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation is completed. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64c attached to the starting port 64 is in the operating state for a predetermined time. (Opened), as a result, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the starting port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times for the ball to pass through the through gate 67, as in the starting port 64, and the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). May be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a starting port 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the starting port 64, the ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is special due to the turning on of the ball entry switch. A symbol lottery is performed, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the starting port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing the holding ball of the special symbol, and the special symbol holding ball of the special symbol is provided. An execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the starting port 64.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the start port 64a. Stored in. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 13A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high-probability special symbols (see FIG. 13 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low-probability special symbols (see FIG. 13 (a)) are mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "7" is added to the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/100".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 13 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22, the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern, and in the voice lamp control device 113, a detailed variation pattern is generated based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The mechanism to be decided will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, variation pattern selection tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols are set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, the variation pattern selection table selected in the normal gaming state is shown, but it is also set in the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, respectively.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time since the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is measured by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the timekeeping data measured by the RTC292, and is normally 54 minutes. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. To. Details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected will differ depending on the period. Set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the variation time of each effect, the result of determining whether the result is correct, or the rough variation. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With such a configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to determine an individual fluctuation pattern, and can reduce the control addition. Further, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can also be suppressed.

The variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described. Each variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol that starts to change and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol at the start of the variation. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set more easily to be selected than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the frequency of the "super reach" fluctuation pattern being executed and becoming a big hit increases, and the player can hit the jackpot when the "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, which is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the variable display, the variable display mode is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is out of alignment, as the fluctuation pattern for deviation, "short-time deviation (for short-time use)" and "long-time deviation (for short-time use)" , "Out of normal reach", "Out of super reach" are stipulated. The short-time deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a variation time (800 ms) shorter than that of other variation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", has a different display mode in which the middle symbol string Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode with respect to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern described later when the hit / fail determination result is deviation. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct is incorrect, the ratio of the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so as to be different.

When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and is not selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy for the game ball to enter the starting port 64, and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period (a period during which the lottery of the game is not executed).

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 3 to 4, the rate at which the variation pattern of "short-time off" is selected is set to be large. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is 3 to 4, which is close to the upper limit, a short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the starting port 64, the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserved balls. It is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. When this is done, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 13C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 13C) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long-time hit are set, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability change period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 64c in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol of "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the random number counter C4 per second is "5 to 20", the second start port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the random number counter C4 per second is "21 to 28", the second start port 64b is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the starting port 64 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the electric function attached to the starting port 64 Since the release period of the object is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second starting port 64b is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a time-saving / medium-time counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first hit. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the starting port 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is used in four holding areas (holding first area to). Among the vacant areas of the reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is obtained in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c displays fluctuations of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entry (starting prize) of the starting port 64 (rows on the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 25).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 25 and S405 in FIG. 27). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. See S704 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 28).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 A value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (Fig.). 29 S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to be turned on when the gaming state is a probability change.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 30) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the payout prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a touch sensor 290, a selection switch 293, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, and a touch effect lottery table 222c. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223 g, set time storage area 223h, preparation period flag 223i, start period flag 223j, SW effective time storage area 223k, SW count counter 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, standby Flag 223o, standby counter 223p, touch effect effective time storage area 223q, cursor position storage area 223r, level storage area 223s, interval counter 223t, firing counter 223u, firing stop flag 223v, number storage area 223w, and other memory areas 223z are at least. It is provided.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, the NOR type ROM 234d is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 46) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 46) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the starting port 64 is detected. In addition, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 46).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the starting port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball goes to the second starting port 64b. The easier it is to enter, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 30).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, in the example of FIG. 30). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 46) (see S1805 in FIG. 46). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 56 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 48 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 47 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 47 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 48 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 49 to 52) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 53 to 55) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 56 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 57) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 23) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 48 (b). ), The pointer update process (FIG. 55) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 48 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 53). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 57). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 57). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 58).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 58).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 32. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299, 99, respectively in this embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 239), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of S207 is executed, the special symbol fluctuation start processing for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). After that, the process of S220 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If it is the above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol change start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing (S208), first, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination of whether or not the period is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability time ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judged as a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and there are two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, Among the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability change period from the jackpot game to the next jackpot), and "60 to". If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 32). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the starting port 64, and if there is a starting winning, various random numbers. It is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the hold process of the value indicated by the counter and the value indicated by the various pending random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the starting opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the starting port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning in the starting port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the starting port 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the starting port 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c The value (N) is added by 1 (S404). Then, a command for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, the hit / fail determination result at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the value of each counter acquired in the process of S405 (S407). The hit / fail determination result determined in S407 is determined (S408). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S408: Yes), the big hit winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order (S408: No), the out of order winning command is set (S410). After the processing of S409 and S410 is completed, this processing is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S107). This normal symbol variation process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric accessory attached to the start port 64 are performed. It is a process for controlling the opening time of.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the starting port 64 is being performed. And are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the starting opening 64 is opened and special. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the winning opening 65a from entering the starting opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the starting opening 64, there are many balls in the starting opening 64 even if the ball is prevented from entering the starting opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Enter the ball. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the starting port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that it is out of the normal symbol.

In the process of S608, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the starting port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is electrically operated as in the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the character is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that it is attached to the starting port 64. The opening period of the electric accessory is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the starting port 64 is 0.2 seconds. At the same time, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the starting port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the starting port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the starting port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 32, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 27) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64c attached to the starting port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S630 or the processing of S634 in FIG. 38 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) is completed, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 28). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 45, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1318 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 35), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1318 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data is transferred to the S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 35). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the processing of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1212, the time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (FIG. 34, S1212), the time information is acquired from the RTC292, and the process of setting the preparation period and the time effect period in the set time storage area 223h is executed based on the time information.

In the time setting process (FIG. 34, S1212), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when assembling the pachinko machine 10, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1222). Here, the deadline data is set to 3 years within 3 and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292 in the present embodiment. A date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the deadline data, and if it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the start timing of the time production cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a time delay or the like due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223 g, which will be described later, is set to be on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC292 is determined, and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. May be good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC292 to a voltage value or higher that allows normal operation.

In the process of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the deadline data, that is, it is determined that 3 years or more have passed (S1222: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the deadline data, that is, within 3 years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, 54 minutes from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is the normal game period (effect mode A), the subsequent 1 minute is the preparation period (effect mode B), and 5 after the preparation period has elapsed. Minutes are set as the time effect period (effect mode C). After 5 minutes of the time production period has elapsed, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and then each period is similarly set.

The details of each period described above will be described later, but between the normal game period and the time production period, the type of the background image on which the notice content and the special symbol are displayed is switched and displayed. In addition, the preparation period is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before switching to the time production period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. It is set to do.

In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time storage area 223h. 54 minutes for executing the game may be set in, the period may be measured by countdown, count-up, or the like, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time of the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variation display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After the process of this command determination process (FIG. 36, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, the processing of the synchronization effect management processing (S1313) is executed. The details of this synchronous effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When the processing of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 35) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the effect mode A is set as the normal game period, the effect mode B is set as the preparation period after 54 minutes, and then the effect mode B is set as the preparation period. The effect mode C is set as the time effect period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, the effect mode A, which is the normal game period, is set again, and the effect mode B and the effect mode C are repeatedly set.

In this way, after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the effect mode is switched every time a predetermined predetermined time elapses, so that the power is turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to match the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, it is a normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 15) or the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (See FIG. 16), the variation pattern is selected and set based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of pending items, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503). After that, the SW notice is selected and set from the SW notice selection table (see FIG. 19A) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the selected variation type, and the value of the effect counter 223f (S1504).

As shown in FIG. 19A, the SW (switch) notice is set to be selected when the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are selected. If another fluctuation pattern is selected, the SW notice is not selected and this process ends and is set. In the present embodiment, the SW notice is selected when either normal reach or super reach is selected, but it is not limited to this and is also selected when another fluctuation pattern is selected. It may be set as follows. Further, the variation pattern is not limited to the selected variation pattern, and a predetermined selection lottery may be executed so that the SW notice is selected when the lottery is won.

Here, the contents of the SW notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 19 (a). As shown in FIG. 7, when the SW notice is selected, three symbols imitating the shape of the frame button 22 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An indicator indicating the SW effective time is displayed at the lower part of the pattern imitating each frame button 22. Each indicator is configured to be displayed in a variable color as the SW effective time elapses.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the symbols imitating the three frame buttons 22 displayed in the SW notice are displayed as "pushA", "pushB", and "pushC", respectively, within the SW effective time. When the frame button 22 is pressed, a notice symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 7 (b). When the frame button 22 is pressed, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 indicated as "pushA" is variably displayed as a notice symbol. Next, when the frame button 22 is pressed, "pushB" is changed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed next, "pushC" is changed to a notice symbol. In the present embodiment, the player can determine that the SW notice of the number of times of pressing three times is selected by the symbol imitating the frame button 22.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, it is configured so that a "fish school", which is a warning symbol in which a school of fish is displayed, is more easily selected than when the result is a hit. Also, by pressing the number of times the SW is pressed, the "foam" notice symbol that displays the notice symbol that the fish is spitting bubbles is selected for the first time (corresponding to "pushA"), and after the second time. A "fish school", a "goldfish school" in which a school of golden fish is displayed, and a "large fish school" in which a large school of fish is displayed are set.

With this configuration, each time the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed notice symbol changes, and the "fish school", "goldfish school", and "large fish school" that are easy to select in the case of a big hit are displayed. You can play the game with the expectation that it will not be displayed. Therefore, the player can play the game while having fun, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, since the "goldfish school" and "large fish school" are set only when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, the player can judge the win / fail by displaying the "goldfish school" or "big fish school". It is possible to know that the result is a big hit earlier than the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, the process in which the SW notice is set will be described in more detail. For example, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S1503 is normal reach, and the value of the effect counter 223f is 50, the value of the SW count counter 223m is "3" (that is, "pushA"). "No notice" is selected for the SW notice symbol of "", "Bubble" is selected for the value of the SW count counter 223m to be "2" (that is, the SW notice symbol of "pushB"), and the number of SWs is set. "Foam" is selected for the value of the counter 223m being "1" (that is, the SW notice symbol of "pushC"). In this way, by setting the content of the SW notice in advance for each number of presses, it is possible to easily perform the process of setting the display when the frame button 22 is pressed. When the SW notice is selected, the SW valid time of each SW notice (“pushA” to “pushC”) is set. In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is set individually for each SW notice, and if the frame button 22 is not pressed even after the SW effective time has elapsed, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed. It will be hidden and the contents of the SW notice will not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the valid time of each SW notice is a predetermined time, for example, for "pushA", 4 seconds from the start of the variable time, and for "pushB", "6 seconds" from the start of the variable time. In "pushC", it is configured to be set as 8 seconds from the start of the fluctuation time.

In the present embodiment, for each SW notice, each time the frame button 22 is pressed in a predetermined order, the SW notice is displayed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player selects. After selecting the SW notice to be displayed by the switch 291 or the like, the contents of the SW notice may be displayed by pressing the frame button 22.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (that is, whether it is the preparation period) (S1505). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1505: Yes), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 17) of the corresponding special symbol (S1506). In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set and the characters "Soon to start contact time !!" are displayed on the background to indicate that the preparation period is in effect. The contact time indicates the time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which a countdown of 1 minute is displayed on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how soon the time production period will start.

In addition, during the preparation period, the advance notice effect is not set. With this configuration, when the time effect period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and a notice effect different from the dedicated notice effect set in the time effect period is displayed. Problems can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1505: No), the variation pattern of the corresponding special symbol is determined. A variation pattern is selected and set from the selection table D (see FIG. 18) (S1507). The notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (not shown) (S1508). In the notice selection table C, the notice content is selected based on the hit / fail determination result and the value of the effect counter 223f. The content of the notice to be selected is to notify the player in advance of the result of the hit / miss determination, and is the content of the notice dedicated to the time production period.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 36. If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1404). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1406). After the processing of S1406 is completed, the process returns to the main processing. In the process of S1407, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1410). After that, it returns to the main process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the starting port 64 (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in the main control device 110, and the acquired counters C1 to C3 are acquired. Each value of is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the processing of S1409, if the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1409: No). S1419), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1511). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1511: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S1516 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1511: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1512), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is selected from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1513).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. You will also be notified of each notice selected here.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1515). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1516.

In the process of S1516, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1516: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S15016: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1517), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. The stop type acquired and instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1518), and the display for notifying the display control device 114. A stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1519). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a synchronization effect management process (S133), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous effect management process (S1313), a process of acquiring time information from RTC292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time effect period based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating it is performed. Execute.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 39, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223 g is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1601: Yes), the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1602). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223i indicating that the preparation period is in progress is on (S1603). When it is determined that the preparation period flag 223i is on (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1602 is the time production period set in the set time storage area 223h (S1604). ). If it is determined that it is not the time production period (S1604: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time production period is set (S1604: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i is set to off (S1605). The start period flag 223j indicating that it is a time production period is set to ON (S1606). The effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1607). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode C (time effect period) is set is set (S1608). When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command indicating the effect mode C, the setting is executed so that the display mode corresponding to the time effect period is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the time production period, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (b) and FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b), the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right. The image of the dog is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left of the display area, a display mode for notifying the player of the operation of the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 is displayed. In addition, the remaining time of the time effect period is displayed in the upper right of the display area.

In this way, when the time effect period is reached, a display mode different from the normal display mode (see FIG. 4B) is displayed. The details of the game during the time production period will be described later, but the display mode (contact with the dog) is dynamically displayed by the player's operation regardless of whether or not the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) is executed. The production) is configured to be displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game even if the game ball is not fired during the time production period. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the display mode displayed during the time production period, the content that interacts with the dog is selected. In the present embodiment, the player selects the effect of stroking the dog and the effect of brushing the dog. When the effect of stroking the dog is selected, as shown in FIG. 9A, the effect of stroking the dog is executed by holding the hand over the touch sensor 290. By stroking the dog, the displayed indicator is added, and the player is given a ticket on the display of the game, which gives the player a privilege that is advantageous to the player who is added up to the maximum. When the ticket is given, the number of tickets is added and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 9A, "ticket x 1" is displayed, and the player is notified that the total number of remaining tickets currently granted is one. Further, when brushing is selected in the display mode shown in FIG. 8 (b), as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the effect of brushing the dog is displayed by holding the hand over the touch sensor 290. Similar to the stroking effect, the brushing effect also allows the player to win a ticket. Here, for the granted ticket, by pressing and holding the frame button 22 during the normal game period, the player can know in advance the result of the winning / failing determination of the reserved special symbol once for each ticket. Is set to. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat in the middle of the game or wants to quit the game, he / she can use the ticket to know in advance the result of the judgment of whether or not the item is on hold, so that the special symbol can be used. Even if you do not have to wait until the fluctuation display ends, you can determine the result of the hit / miss judgment and leave the seat early if it is not a big hit. With such a configuration, even if the player wants to go to the toilet, he / she can go to the toilet quickly and can play the game efficiently.

In the present embodiment, in the production displayed during the time production period, a ticket is given to the player when the player actively participates, but the ticket is not limited to this, for example, the jackpot is not limited to the production mode. When a variable type (for example, super reach) that is easily selected in the case is selected, a ticket may be given if the lottery result is out of order. In this case, a symbol indicating that a ticket is to be given to the middle symbol of the special symbol is set, and when a ticket is granted, the symbol is stopped and displayed so that the player can easily understand it. Can be notified. Further, it may be configured to give to the player when the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times but the big hit is not obtained.

Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. In the process of S1603, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223i is off (S1603: No), it is determined that the start period flag 223j is on (S1609). When it is determined that the start period flag 223j is on (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1602 is outside the time effect period (S1610). When it is determined that the time is outside the effect period (S1610: Yes), the start period flag 223j is set to off (S1611), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1612). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode A is set is set (S1613). After that, this process ends. The display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 6B based on the reception of this command. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1609 that the start period flag 223j is off (S1609: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1602 is within the preparation period (S1614). When it is determined that the acquired time data is within the preparation period (S1614: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i is set to ON (S1615), and the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1616). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode B is set (S1617). After that, this process ends. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching to a background image or the like corresponding to the preparation period on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of this command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 40, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the firing sensor 293 is on. As shown in FIG. 2, the firing sensor 293 has a configuration capable of detecting a game ball fired in the game area at the tip of the rail 61. The firing sensor 293 is configured to detect the passage of the game ball by detecting the change in magnetism due to the passage of the game ball.

In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the firing sensor 293 is on (S1701: Yes), the firing counter 223u is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1702), and the firing stop flag 223v is set to off (S1701). S1703). After that, the process of S1707 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the firing sensor 293 is off (S1701: No), the value of the firing counter 223u is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705). It is determined whether or not the value of the firing counter 223u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the count value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds) (S1705). When it is determined that the firing counter 223u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1705: Yes), the firing stop flag 223v indicating that the game ball has not been fired is set to ON (S1706). After that, the process of S1707 is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the voice lamp control device 113 is firing the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the production during the time production period, the player who is playing the game by firing the game ball is configured to be more likely to be given a ticket than the player who is not firing. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to launch a game ball and give more benefits to the player who is playing the game, and to fire the game ball to the player to play the game. Can be encouraged.

In the process of S1707, it is determined whether the effect mode A is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (that is, whether it is a normal game period) (S1707). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1707: Yes), the SW effect control process is executed (S1708).

Here, the SW effect control process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this SW effect control process (S1708). In the SW effect control process (S1708), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time is set (S1721). When it is determined that the SW effective time is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the read-ahead notification is possible period (S1722). The pre-reading notification period is determined whether the pre-reading is not feasible, such as during a jackpot game, during standby, or when there is no acquired ticket. Although not shown here, a process of setting a flag indicating that pre-reading notification is possible and determining whether the flag is on is executed. This flag is set to off when the look-ahead notification is impossible, such as during a big hit. During the look-ahead notification period, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed and held, a notification mode for notifying that the look-ahead is notified using a ticket is displayed. Then, when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 in that state, as shown in FIG. 6B, the color of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 is variably displayed based on the hit / fail determination result. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 6B, when a lottery result of a reserved special symbol is stored, the color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the jackpot is changed to gold and displayed. Then, the character "chance !!" is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the player is notified that the pending one includes a big hit. If a big hit is not stored in the hold, the color of the hold symbol is not changed and the character "Sorry !!" is displayed in the small area Ds2.

When it is determined that the read-ahead notification is possible period (S1722: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1723). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1723: No), the process of S1727 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the SW pressing time counter (not shown) to update. It is determined whether the value of the SW pressing time counter is larger than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value (3000) indicating 3 seconds). When it is determined that the SW pressing time counter is a value larger than the upper limit value (that is, when the frame button 22 is pressed and held for a long time) (S1725: Yes), ticket processing is executed (S1726). After that, the process of S1727 is executed.

Here, the ticket processing (S1726) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this ticket processing (S1726). In the ticket processing (S1726), first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is larger than 0 (that is, whether the reserved number is larger than 0) (S1741). If it is determined that the number of reserved items is 0 (S1741: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is larger than 0 (S1741: Yes), the value of the number storage area 223w is subtracted by 1 (S1742). Whether or not there is a big hit hold in the hold is determined from the winning information storage area 223a (S1743). When it is determined that a hold that is a big hit is stored in the hold (S1743: Yes), a display hold command for notifying that the color of the hold symbol that is a big hit is changed to gold is set (S1744). .. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the holds are out of order (S1743: No), a display hold command for displaying the look-ahead result corresponding to the out of place is set (S1745). Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold command corresponding to the disconnection, the number of tickets is subtracted by 1 and displayed, and the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) is displayed as "Sorry! Executes the process of displaying the characters "!".

In this way, the ticket can be used to notify the player of the lottery result of the reserved special symbol at the timing desired by the player, so that the player is attracted to the fact that the ticket is given. I can feel it. Therefore, during the time production period, it is possible to induce the player to play the contact production in order to obtain a ticket.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading result is notified as a privilege of using the ticket, but the game state (whether it is a high-probability game state or a normal probability game state) is not limited to that. As a configuration that does not notify the player, the current gaming state may be notified by using a ticket. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to determine whether the subsequent game state is a probable change in the case of a big hit, and it can be configured to continue the game even after the big hit. In this case, by using the ticket, the current gaming state can be determined, so that the player can be reminded to acquire the ticket during the time production period. Therefore, the player can feel the value by the time production period. In addition, the privilege given to the ticket may be configured to set other privilege. A plurality of benefits may be set so that the player can select them, or the contents of the benefits may be changed depending on the number of tickets acquired.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 41. After the ticket processing (FIG. 42, S1726) is executed, the processing of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, the SW press time counter (not shown) is reset (S1727). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1721 that the SW effective time is set (S1721: Yes), the value of the SW effective time storage area 223k is subtracted to update the SW effective time (S1728). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1729). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1729: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1729: Yes), the notice selected from the SW notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 19A) corresponding to the value of the SW count counter 223m. A display notice command indicating the content is set (S1730). The value of the SW count counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S1731) to determine whether the value of the SW count counter 223m is 0 (S1732). If it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223m is not 0 (S1732: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223m is 0 (S1732: Yes), the SW effective time is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and set (S1733). After that, this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 40. In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1707: No), it is determined whether the effect mode C is stored in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1709). .. If it is determined that the effect mode C is not set (that is, the effect mode B is set) (S1709: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1709: Yes), the special SW effect control process is executed (S1710).

Here, the special SW effect control process (S1710) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this special SW effect control process (S1710). In the special SW effect control process (S1710), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S1751). As shown in FIG. 8A, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the contact effect is on standby during the time effect period. When the player turns on the touch sensor 290, the waiting dog is approached and displayed (see FIG. 8B). In this case, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

When it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S1751: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S1752). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1752: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S1753). A display status command indicating that the wait flag 223o is off is set (S1754). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1752, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S1752: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1751 that the standby flag 223o is off (S1751: No), it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is set in the touch effect effective time storage area 223q (S1755). When it is determined that the touch effect effective time is set (S1755: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S1756). After that, this process ends.

Here, the touch sensor control process (S1756) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this touch sensor control process (S1756). In the touch sensor control process (S1756), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted and stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223q. It is determined whether the level set in the level storage area 223s is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If it is determined that the current level is the upper limit (S1762: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current level is less than the upper limit value (S1762: No), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S1763). A display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is turned on is set (S1764). The value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1765). Based on the interval counter and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the touch effect lottery is executed from the touch effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 19B). As shown in FIG. 19B, the touch effect lottery table 222c is hit by the acquired effect counter 223f based on whether the game ball is fired, the selected touch effect, and the value of the interval counter 223t. Is determined. Here, when the game ball is fired, a larger value of the effect counter 223f, which is determined to be a hit, is set than when the game ball is not fired. In addition, there are two types of touch effects, "stroking" and "brushing". As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b), "stroking" and "brushing" are different operations for the player. Is urging you to turn on the touch sensor 290. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the “stroking” effect, the touch sensor 290 is turned on by turning a hand around the frame button 22 at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. I urge the player to do that. This is similar to the action of the player stroking the dog's head in a circle with his or her hand, which makes the player feel as if he or she is actually stroking the dog.

On the other hand, in the "brushing" effect, as shown in FIG. 9B, a display prompting the player to move his / her hand by linearly reciprocating from above the touch sensor 290 to the upper side of the frame button 22. The aspect is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. By encouraging the player to perform an action similar to that of brushing a dog in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is brushing the dog.

The "stroking" effect and the "brushing" effect are urging the player to perform different actions for turning on the touch sensor 290. Here, in the present embodiment, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, a display mode for stroking or brushing the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In the end, even if you keep holding your hand over the touch sensor 290, you can stroke the dog or brush it. As a result, even one sensor can be easily stroked or brushed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on once and then turned off, the time is measured by the interval counter 223t. Then, the number of values of the effect counter 223f, which is a hit, is changed and set according to the time (see FIG. 19B).

In the "stroking" effect, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on by moving the hand so as to quickly rotate around the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms. This assumes the time required for a general person to move his / her hand with a circle about the size of the outer shape of the frame button 22 as soon as possible. Therefore, in the stroking effect, when the interval counter 223t counts the time of 151 ms to 500 ms, the value of the effect counter 223f, which is the most hit, is set to be large. That is, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on at intervals within the time range and the effect of stroking is executed, it is most easily hit, the level rises well, and it is easy to obtain a ticket.

Further, in the range before and after that (1 ms to 150 ms, 501 ms to 2000 ms), a smaller number of hit values than in the case of 151 ms to 500 ms are set. In addition, when the interval is other than that, the number of hit values is set to be the smallest, and it is difficult to hit. Here, when the value of the interval counter 223t is 0 ms, that is, when the touch effect is performed while holding the hand over the touch sensor 290, the value is set to the smallest hit value. Therefore, it is possible to operate the player with an action prompting by a stroking effect to turn on the touch sensor 290. Further, since the player who has turned on the touch sensor 290 by the motion urged by the stroking effect can be configured so that the level can be raised more easily, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the correct motion.

Further, in the brushing effect, it is assumed that the time required for a general person to quickly reciprocate his / her hand linearly between the upper part of the touch sensor 290 and the upper part of the upper end of the frame button 22 is 150 ms. .. Therefore, when the interval counter 223t counts in the range of 71 ms to 350 ms, the number of hit values is set to the maximum. Also, as with the stroking effect, when the time is 0 ms and the interval is longer than 2 seconds, the number of hit values is set to the smallest, so the game continues to hold the touch sensor 290. It is difficult to give a ticket to a person or a player who turns on the touch sensor 290 with an extremely slow operation. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the correct movement and participate in the production.

Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S1763 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S1763: No), the value of the interval counter 223t is incremented by 1 and updated (S1763). After that, this process ends. The interval counter 223t is a counter for measuring the interval from when the touch sensor 290 is turned on to when it is turned on next, and the elapsed time is determined from the control execution interval based on the counter value. Further, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, it is reset to the initial value of 0 (see S1772).

In the process of S1767, it is determined whether or not the lottery result determined in the process of S1766 is a hit (S1767). If it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1767: No), the process of S1772 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1767: Yes), 1 is added to the level storage area 223s and set (S1768). A display command indicating the value of the level storage area 223s is set (S1769). When this display command is received by the display control device 114, as shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b), the indicator displayed in the “stroking” effect or the “brushing” effect is adjusted to the received level. Is variable and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that his / her operation is good and can prevent the player from getting tired of the production.

It is determined whether the level set in the level storage area 223s is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1770). When it is determined that the level is the upper limit value (S1770: Yes), 1 is added to the number storage area 223w, and a display command indicating the number is set (S1771). On the other hand, if it is determined that the level is less than the upper limit value (S1770: No), the process of S1772 is executed. The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of tickets according to the number of tickets based on the reception of the display command indicating the number of tickets. In the process of S1772, the value of the interval counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1772).

In this way, the interval counter 223t can determine the interval at which the touch sensor 290 is correctly operated by resetting to the initial value of 0 based on the fact that the touch sensor 290 is set to ON. Further, in the present embodiment, when the touch sensor 290 is determined to be on, it is determined to be on when the touch sensor 290 is set to be on for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 50 ms). is doing. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor 290 from being determined to be excessively on and the number of lottery to be excessive. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on for a predetermined time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is determined to be on once, it is determined to be on once for a predetermined period (for example, 50 ms). , Next, it may be configured not to perform the determination of whether it is on. Further, the lottery probability of the effect may be changed depending on the current level, or the interval for determining that the touch sensor 290 may be turned on may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S1755 that the touch effect effective time is not set (S1755: No), the interval counter 223t and the level storage area 223s are reset to the initial values (S1757). Next, the touch effect selection process is executed (S1758). After that, this process ends.

Here, the touch effect selection process (S1758) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this touch effect selection process (S1758). In the touch effect selection process (S1758), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1781). Here, since the touch effect selection process (S1758) is a process executed when the touch effective time is not set, the touch effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 8 (b). This is the process to be executed when the display mode for allowing the player to select the content of is displayed. In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the touch effect selected by the cursor is determined among the touch effect candidates displayed at the lower left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the touch effect is determined. Set.

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1781: Yes), the touch effect set in the cursor position storage area 223r is selected (S1782). A display touch effect command indicating the selected touch effect is set (S1783). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1781: No), it is determined whether the selection switch 291 (see FIG. 5) has been operated (S1784). When it is determined that the selection switch 291 has been operated (S1784: Yes), a display command indicating the position corresponding to the type of the selection switch 291 (whether the left selection switch 291L or the right selection switch 291R) is issued. Set (S1785). The display control device 114 executes a process of moving the cursor position to display it based on this command. The cursor position is determined, and the touch effect information is set in the cursor position storage area 223r (S1786). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1784, when it is determined that the selection switch 291 is not operated (S1784: No), the standby counter 223p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1787). The standby counter 223p is a counter for measuring the time when neither the frame button 22 nor the selection switch 291 is operated after the display mode shown in FIG. 8B is displayed. When the time during which neither the frame button 22 nor the selection switch 291 is operated exceeds a predetermined upper limit value (20 seconds in this embodiment), the display mode is switched to the standby state display mode shown in FIG. 8A. Execute the process to be performed.

It is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223p is larger than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 20 seconds). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223p is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1788: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to ON (S1789), and the standby counter 223p is reset to the initial value 0 (S1789: Yes). S1790), a display status command indicating that the standby flag 223o is on is set (S1791). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1788, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223p is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S1788: No), this process is terminated.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 58, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls to the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 46) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902, the process of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the process of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 71 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 48 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first starting port 64a (starting prize), and the main control device 110 gave a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52.

In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined by the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to process S2104. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIGS. 49 and 50, S2102), as shown in FIGS. 49 to 50, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and the unprocessed command is processed. If there is no new command (S2201: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403).

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). When it is determined that the display effect command is received (S2208: Yes), the display data of the effect based on the command is set (S2209).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display effect command (S2208: No), the reserved symbol data based on the command is set (S2211). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed, and the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S2210: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S2212). When it is determined that there is a display notice command (S2212: Yes), possession data of the notice based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed to set a display such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S2212: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command. When it is determined that there is a display status command (S2214: Yes), display data corresponding to the status based on the command is set. As a result, the display corresponding to the time effect and the like is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display touch command (S2216). When it is determined that there is a display touch command (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display data is set based on the command (S2217). As a result, the display corresponding to the touch effect such as the contact effect is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2218), and if there is an error command (S2218). : Yes), error command processing is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2219) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2902. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2219 (S2219: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2220), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2220 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2220 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 48 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 51 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2301. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 53, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 53. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3201, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 53. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (b). FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 48 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 49 to 52) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 53 to 55) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 57) (see S3301: No in FIG. 56 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3514), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S3518). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240). You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, and the number of reserved balls. The case of including it in the command has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is input to the voice lamp by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 69. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a SW notice having a predetermined number of times is notified and displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the total number of SW notices can be determined, but the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is not notified, and the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is predicted and pressed. The notice effect is different from that of the first embodiment in that the notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the same configuration as the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 59 to 62, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described.

FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (b) show the period of each fluctuation time (before reach) depending on the type of SW notice when any of the super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C (see FIGS. 15 to 16) is selected. It is a timing chart showing the state in which the SW notice is set for each of the period, reach fluctuation period, super reach fluctuation period, and re-variation period). Here, the pre-reach period is a period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the reach display mode. The reach variation period is the period from the reach display mode to the display of the super reach display mode. The super reach display mode is a variation pattern of the super reach, and is a display mode in which the reach display mode is displayed, and then a character or the like is displayed to continuously display the reach display mode. The re-variation period is a display effect (for example, 1 to 9) as to whether or not the special symbol is changed to the jackpot A after the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot B in the super reach display mode. This is the period during which the effect of rotating the doublet symbol and displaying it as a stop is executed.

In FIG. 59 (a), one SW notice is set as a comment notice during the first half of the reach, one SW notice is set as a character notice during the reach fluctuation period, and two re-variation notices are set during the re-variation period. It is a timing chart which showed the example of the case. FIG. 59B is a timing chart showing an example in which the SW notice is set once as a comment notice during the reach period and the SW notice is set three times as a re-variation notice during the re-variation period.

As described above, in both the example of FIG. 59 (a) and the example of FIG. 59 (b), the number of SW notices set in the variation display of one special symbol is four, but the frame button 22 is pressed. The timing is set to be different. In the configuration of the present embodiment, the number of SW notices is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is not notified, so that the player predicts the timing of pressing the frame button 22. Then, by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to enjoy whether the display mode of the SW notice is displayed.

Further, as the variable display of the special symbol progresses, if the frame button 22 is not pressed even after the period in which the SW notice is set has elapsed, the number of SW notices displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is subtracted. Is displayed. As a result, the player can determine that the SW notice has been set within the elapsed period, and the more the games are repeated, the more accurately the timing of pressing the frame button 22 can be predicted. Therefore, the more skilled the player is, the more the display mode of the SW notice can be seen, and the enjoyment of playing the game for a long time can be increased.

With reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, a display mode for each period in which the SW notice is set will be described. 60 (a) to 60 (b) are diagrams showing a display mode of a comment notice set in the pre-reach period shown in FIG. 59. If the SW notice of the comment notice is set during the first half of the reach, when the frame button 22 is pressed during that period, the dog character is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (a), and then FIG. 60 (b). As shown in, the comment "Chance !!" is displayed along with the balloon. The content of the comment displayed here is selected by lottery from the SW notice selection table 65 (a). The details of this selection control will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the display mode of the SW notice set as the character notice in the reach fluctuation period will be described. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state of the reach fluctuation period when the left symbol and the right symbol of the main symbol are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the same symbol (“7” symbol in FIG. 61 (a)). Is shown. FIG. 61B shows an example of a display mode of the SW notice in which a school of fish crosses from right to left when the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach fluctuation period. In this way, during the reach fluctuation period, when the frame button 22 is pressed, preset characters (a school of fish, bubbles, sunfish, etc.) are displayed, and a notice is given about the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is being changed. In the present embodiment, the school of fish is set to be easier to select when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is a big hit than when it is out of order, and the player can switch the fish school (fish school). The frame button 22 can be pressed in the hope that the notice will not be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a display mode of the SW notice displayed by the third symbol display device 81 during the revariable period will be described. In the revariable period, the type of the symbol is changed and displayed each time the frame button 22 is pressed after the special symbol (even symbol) indicating the jackpot B is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a)). , What was displayed with the symbol of "4" is displayed with the symbol of "6" as shown in FIG. 62 (b)). In this way, in the re-variation period, the symbol can be changed and displayed up to the number of times of the notified SW notice, and the player is changed to the symbol indicating the jackpot A as the number of SW notices increases. You can expect that. In the re-variation period, a reduced special symbol is variablely displayed in the upper right of the display area in order to show the player that the symbol is still variable and displayed in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, even if the third symbol is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the player can easily recognize that the third symbol is still changing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of SW notices is notified at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the number of SW notices set in each period is changed even if the number of SW notices is the same. Since it is set, the player can feel the freshness of the game and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, if a large number of SW notices remain by the re-variation period, the expectation for jackpot A (probability change jackpot) can be higher, and the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot A (probability change jackpot) depending on which period the SW notice is set. You can change your expectations for big hits. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the total number of SW notices is large and easy to be selected, so that it is possible to enjoy whether the number of SW notices is larger or smaller at the start of fluctuation.

Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the SW notice is displayed in a display mode for notifying the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing in each period, and the expectation of a big hit is high in the previous period. When is displayed, the SW notice, which is expected to be lower than that, is not displayed in the subsequent period. As a result, the player can enjoy a plurality of SW notices without lowering the expectation for the jackpot. In addition, even if the display mode of the SW notice with a low expectation for a big hit is displayed in the previous period, it is expected that the SW notice with a high expectation for a big hit will be displayed in the subsequent SW notice. It can be performed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. The differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the contents of the SW notice selection table 222b are changed in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment with respect to the first embodiment, and the SW number of times is selected. Table 222d has been added. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment has a progress mode storage area 223x and a fluctuation time counter 223y, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment. Has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW notice selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (b). FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the SW notice table for selecting the display mode of the SW notice dedicated to the progress mode A (pre-reach period). Further, FIG. 65B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the SW notice table for selecting the display mode of the SW notice dedicated to the progress mode D (re-variation period).

In the SW notice selection table dedicated to the progress mode A, the production counters are assigned to the contents of the comment notices, which are the respective SW notices, depending on whether the hit / fail determination result is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the miss. As the content of the comment notice, "super heat", "chance", "..." are set, and when the hit / fail judgment result is jackpot A (probability variable jackpot) or jackpot B (normal jackpot), " It is set so that it is easier to select than when the comment notice of "Intense heat" is missed. Further, the jackpot A is set so that the comment notice of "super heat" is more easily selected than the jackpot B. Further, among the number of SW notices set in the period of the progress mode A, the effect counter 223f is assigned to the value of the remaining number of times. Further, when the remaining number of SW notices is one, the content of the selected comment notice is set to be variable depending on whether the SW notice is displayed when the remaining number of times is two.

Specifically, when the number of SW notices is selected twice during the progress mode A and "chance" is selected and displayed in the first SW notice (remaining number of times 2), the following In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the comment notice is selected, the comment notice is selected from the set value of the effect counter 223f set corresponding to the previous "chance". It should be noted that the value of the effect counter 223f is not assigned to the comment notice of "..." in the previous "chance", and "..." is not selected. Here, the player is highly expected that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol that is changing in the order of "heat", "chance", "..." is a big hit, and once " When the comment notice of "chance" is selected, "...", which has a lower expectation than "chance", is not selected.

In this way, by configuring so that the notice with a lower expectation than the notice displayed earlier in the SW notice set multiple times is not displayed, the expectation for the big hit becomes ambiguous. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that lowers the expectation for a big hit.

For example, when the hit / fail determination result is the jackpot B, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is 100, and the remaining number of SW notices in the progress mode A is 2, "chance" is selected. Next, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is 169 when the frame button 22 is pressed, the SW notice of the SW notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 65 (a)) dedicated to the progress mode A is announced. The comment notice of "chance" is selected by discriminating from the value of the effect counter 223f set in the previous "chance" once the remaining number of times.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the dedicated SW notice selection table is similarly set in the progress mode B (reach fluctuation period) and the progress mode C (super reach fluctuation period), and the acquired effect is obtained. The content of the SW notice is selected based on the value of the counter 223f.

The SW notice selection table shown in FIG. 64 (b) is a table for selecting the content of the SW notice in the progress mode D (revariation period). Since the re-variation is executed when the jackpot is a jackpot, the notice contents are set corresponding to the jackpot types of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, respectively. Based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed, it is set based on the value of the effect counter 223f that has acquired whether to display the probabilistic symbol or the normal symbol.

The SW number selection table 222d is a selection table for determining the number of SW notices for one variation of the special symbol in the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the SW number selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 64, in the SW number selection table 222d, the number type of each SW notice corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f based on whether the hit / fail determination result is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the miss. It is assigned and set. Further, progress A shown in FIG. 64 indicates a pre-reach period, progress B indicates a reach fluctuation period, progress C indicates a super reach fluctuation period, and progress D indicates a re-variation period, which are set in each period. The number of SW notices to be given is set.

The progress mode storage area 223x is a storage area for setting which period (one of progress A to progress D) the current period is when the super reach fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is dynamically displayed. Is. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the current progress mode is determined from the progress mode stored in the progress mode storage area 223x, and the content of the SW notice is selected and displayed.

The fluctuation time counter 223y is a counter for counting the fluctuation time in the super reach of the special symbol. When the dynamic display of the super reach fluctuation pattern is started, the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y is added by 1, and the elapsed time is determined from the execution cycle. In the initial state such as when the power is turned on, it is set to 0, which is the initial value.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 40, S1307) is the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 68, FIG. 68) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. It is different in that it is changed to S1301) and the variation effect management process (FIG. 67, S1315) is added and set. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation effect management process (S1315) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this variation effect management process (S1315). In the variation effect management process (S1315), first, it is determined whether or not the super reach variation pattern is variablely displayed as the variation of the special symbol. When it is determined that the super reach fluctuation pattern is not variablely displayed (S4001: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the super reach is changing (S4001: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y is added by 1 and updated (S4002). From the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y, it is determined whether or not it is the period of the progress mode B (reach fluctuation period). If it is determined that the period is the progress mode B (S4003: Yes), the progress mode B is set in the progress mode storage area 223x (S4004). It is determined whether there is a difference between the current SW count counter 223 m and the number of remaining effects (S4005). When it is determined that there is a difference (S4005: Yes), the difference is subtracted from the SW count counter 223m and updated (S4006). A display SW count command indicating the value of the SW count counter 223m is set (S4007). After that, this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display SW count command, the process of updating and displaying the displayed SW press count is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no difference in the processing of S4005 (S4005: No), this processing is terminated.

In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y updated in S4002 is not the time corresponding to the progress mode B (S4003: No), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y is the period of the progress mode C. It is determined whether or not there is (S4008). If it is determined that the period is the progress mode C (S4008: Yes), the progress mode C is set in the progress mode storage area 223x (S4009). After that, the processes of S4006 to S4007 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4008, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223y is not the period of the progress mode C (S4008: No), it is determined whether it is the period of the progress mode D (S4010). If it is determined that the period is the progress mode D (S4010: Yes), the progress mode D is set in the progress mode storage area 223x (S4011). Then, after executing the processes of S4006 to S4007, this process is terminated.

As a result, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is executed, the fluctuation time is also measured by the voice lamp control device 113, and the progress mode is determined based on the passage of the fluctuation time. Then, when it is determined that the progress mode has reached the switching period, the remaining number of current SW notices and the actual number of remaining SW notices are determined, and if there is a difference, the correction is executed. , The remaining number of SW notices displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also updated and displayed. In this way, when the super reach fluctuation is started, the number of SW notices is automatically subtracted and updated as the fluctuation time elapses. As a result, the player can determine that the SW notice that can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 has been set, and at what timing the SW notice is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

In this embodiment, the SW notice is set to be displayed in the case of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be set for other fluctuation patterns, and is not limited to the fluctuation pattern. , May be configured to determine whether or not to set by a predetermined lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1330). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 68, S1330) in the second embodiment is a SW effect control process (FIG. 68, S1307) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 40, S1307) in the first embodiment. 41, S1708) is different in that it is changed to SW effect control process 2 (FIG. 69, S4020). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect control process 2 (S4020) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the SW effect control process 2 (S4020). In the SW effect control process 2 (FIG. 69, S4020) in the second embodiment, each process from S1728 to SS1733 is from S4021 to S4027 with respect to the SW effect control process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to each process of.

If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the SW effective time is set (S1721: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted and set in the SW effective time storage area 223k (S4021). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4022). It is determined whether there is a selectable SW notice effect in the current progress mode, that is, whether there is a remaining number of SW notices set in the current progress mode (S4023). When it is determined that there is a selectable effect (S4023: Yes), the display mode of the SW notice is selected from the SW notice selection table 222b based on the SW count counter 223m and the current progress mode (S4024).

The value of the SW count counter 223m is decremented by -1 and updated (S4025). It is determined whether the value of the SW count counter 223m is 0 (S4026). When it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223m is 0 (S4026: Yes), the SW effective time storage area 223k is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S4027). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW count counter 223m is not 0 (S4026: No), this process is terminated.

<About the modified example in the second embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 70, instead of setting a fixed number of times for each period as in the second embodiment, only the maximum number of SW notices for the entire fluctuation pattern is set, and the player presses the frame button. It may be configured to set the SW notice at the timing when 22 is pressed.

With this configuration, it is possible to display a large number of SW notices for the player's favorite period, and it is possible to display an effect that suits the player's taste.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 78. .. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a SW notice having a predetermined number of times is notified and displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the effect of pressing and holding the frame button 22 is executed, when the long press is started before the predetermined long press start trigger. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to set the period for valid determination to be long-pressed earlier. In the same configuration as the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the display mode in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a display mode of the long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described.

FIG. 71 is a timing chart of the long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the long press effect is started, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the characters "Press and hold to save up to MAX !!" are displayed, and below that, a design and a frame imitating an indicator and a frame button 22 are displayed. A meter indicating the SW effective time in which the operation of the button 22 is determined to be valid is displayed. The third symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area. From this display mode, the player can recognize that if the indicator can be changed to the position of MAX, the hit / fail determination result of the changing special symbol (third symbol) is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation notification display mode (see FIG. 72 (a)) for notifying that the long press effect is started and the long press is performed is the operation notification period (in this embodiment, 5 seconds). )Is displayed. After that, when the SW effective time for determining that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid starts, the characters "READY GO !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 72 (b). , The characters "Start long press !!" notifying that the frame button 22 is pressed and held are displayed at the upper part of the pattern imitating the frame button 22. Then, when the long press is executed by the player, a display mode in which the indicator scales are colored one by one is displayed based on the long press operation.

On the other hand, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 71 (b), the start of the long press effect is displayed for the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), and the long press is started during the operation notification period. It is a timing chart showing an example. If the long press is long-pressed before the start of the actual SW effective time, the SW effective time is changed and set to start from the timing when the long press is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 73A, the portion where the meter indicating the SW effective time is colored from the right end is the background color so as to indicate that the SW effective time is subtracted from the operation notification period and updated. It is variable to the same color or pattern as. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), even when the actual timing of displaying the characters "READY GO !!" is reached, the characters are not displayed.

With this configuration, the frame button 22 is pressed, misunderstanding that it is the timing for the player to start the long press, despite the period during which the long press effect is started and the operation notification is given. Even when is started, the operation can be enabled and a long press effect can be executed. Therefore, even though the player has started the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation is wasted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. A long press lottery table 222e is added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. Further, a long press level storage area 223α is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 75, the long press lottery table 222e of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press lottery table 222e. Whether or not the long press lottery table 222e displays the indicator scale in color each time it is determined that the long press has been performed (every time the frame button 22 is determined to be pressed for 3 seconds) is displayed. It is a lottery table for lottery (whether or not to raise). As shown in FIG. 75, in the long-press lottery table 222e, the value of the effect counter 223f is set with respect to the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol and the level of the indicator (long-press level) in the current long-press effect. It is assigned and set. If the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is the same as the value of the effect counter 223f set in the long press lottery table 222e, it is determined that the result is a hit, and one indicator level is added and set. It should be noted that the value of the effect counter 223f, which is determined to be a hit, is set to be higher when the hit / fail determination result is a hit than when it is a hit, and the probability of a hit is set higher. With this configuration, the player can expect that the result of the hit / fail determination of the changing special symbol will be a hit as the level of the indicator tends to rise.

Further, as the level of the indicator increases, the number of effect counters 223f determined to be hit is set to be smaller. As a result, the higher the indicator, the slower the pace at which the indicator rises, and the longer the player can enjoy the long press effect.

The long press level storage area 223α is a storage area for storing the level of the indicator in the long press effect. The level of the indicator in the long press effect is set from 0 to 4, and the initial value is set to 0.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 76, S1340) in the third embodiment is a SW effect control process (S1708) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 40, S1307) in the first embodiment. ) Has been changed to SW effect control process 3 (FIG. 77, S4030). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the SW effect control process 3 (S4030) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the SW effect control process 3 (S4030). In the SW effect control process 3 (FIGS. 77, S4030) in the third embodiment, the processes S4031 to S4034 are added to the SW effect control process (FIGS. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment, respectively. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the SW effective time is set, the long press control process is executed (S4034). This long press control process will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the long press control process (S4034).

In the long press control process (FIG. 78, S4034), first, the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S4101). It is determined whether the timing is after the actual start of pressing (S4102). If the timing is not after the actual start of pressing (S4102: No), a display command indicating the start notification prohibition is set (S4103). The actual timing is the start timing set in the SW notice. That is, when the player presses the frame button 22 before the start timing and the SW effective time is set, the display of "READY GO !!" is prohibited and set, while the actual pressing is performed. If the timing is after the start (S4102: Yes), the process of S4104 is executed.

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4104). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4104: Yes), the SW pressing time is incremented by 1 and updated (S4105). Here, the SW press time counter (not shown) is added by 1 and stored. It is determined whether the SW pressing time is equal to or longer than the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment), that is, whether the frame button 22 is pressed and held (S4106).

When it is determined that the frame button 22 is long-pressed (S4106: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4107). The lottery result is acquired from the long press lottery table 222e (see FIG. 75). Here, when the value of the effect counter 223f set in the long press lottery table 222e shown in FIG. 75 and the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S4107 match, it is determined to be a hit.

It is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S4108 is a win (S4109). If the lottery result is a win (S4109: Yes), the value of the long press level storage area 223α is incremented by 1 and updated (S4110). Set the display command based on the updated long press level. As a result, the display of the indicator displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 is set based on the long press level. After that, the process of S4112 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4104: No), in the process of S4106, when it is determined that the button is not pressed for a long time (S4106: No), the lottery result is obtained in S4109. If it is determined that is out of order (S4109: No), the process of S4112 is executed. In the process of S4112, the value of the SW effective time storage area 223k is reset to 0, which is the period value (S4112).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect of pressing and holding the frame button 22 is configured so as not to give a disadvantage to the player who presses the frame button 22 quickly.

Although the effect of long pressing has been described in the present embodiment, the configuration of the present embodiment may be used for the effect of causing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the long press is effectively started at the timing when the long press is started, the long press is determined by detecting the edge in which the frame button 22 is started from OFF to ON. Even if it is present, it can be correctly determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the long press effect, the characters "READY GO !!" are displayed at the timing when the long press is started. In this case, if the player does not press the frame button 22, "READY" is displayed again.
GO! !! Press and hold when the text is displayed! !! , And then the characters "READY GO !!" may be displayed.

With this configuration, a player who has overlooked the characters "READY GO !!" or a player who does not know the game method and has not pressed the frame button 22 can press the frame button 22 to play the game. Can be encouraged to participate in.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine fused with the slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Further, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.
<Characteristic A group>
Based on the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination means, and the establishment of the start condition, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Dynamic display execution means to be performed, dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, operation means that can be operated by the player, and the above-mentioned. When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the notification information based on the pass / fail determination result indicated by the dynamically displayed identification information is displayed based on the operation of the operation means. In a gaming machine having an information display executing means to be displayed on the display means, the number of times the operating means is operated within the dynamic display mode of 1 and the information is displayed by the information display executing means is determined. A valid period determination means for determining the number of times determining means, a notification means for notifying the player of the number of times determined by the number of times determining means, and an operation valid period for determining the operation as valid when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine A1 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the number of times the operation means is operated within the dynamic display mode of 1 and the information is displayed by the information display execution means is determined by the number of times determination means. The number of times determined by the number determination means is notified to the player by the notification means. When the operation means is operated, the operation validity period for determining the operation as valid is determined by the validity period determining means. Thereby, the player can predict and enjoy at what timing in the dynamic display mode 1 the information of the number of times notified by the notification means is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine A1, it is set by the effect period setting means for setting a plurality of effect periods within the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and the effect period setting means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by having a distribution means for distributing and setting the maximum number of times determined by the number of times determining means in each effect period.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, within the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, a plurality of effect periods are set by the effect period setting means. The number of times determined by the number of times determination means is distributed and set by the distribution means in each effect period set by the effect period setting means. As a result, the number of times can be variously distributed to one dynamic display mode, so that it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming rut.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notification means causes the display means to display the determined number of times by a notification symbol for each number of times, and the valid period corresponding to the notification symbol notified by the notification means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized by having a period display executing means for causing the display means to display a period identification display mode capable of identifying an operation valid period determined by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times determined by the display means is displayed by the notification means in the notification symbol according to the number of times. The period identification display mode capable of identifying the operation valid period determined by the valid period determining means corresponding to the notification symbol notified by the notification means is displayed on the display means by the period display executing means. As a result, the determined number of times can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the period identification display mode displayed by the period display executing means is configured to have a display mode capable of identifying a valid period corresponding to a plurality of the notification symbols. A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the period identification display mode displayed by the period display executing means is configured to be a display mode capable of identifying the valid period corresponding to a plurality of notification symbols. , There is an effect that the timing of operating the operating means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the information display executing means has an information determining means for determining one information from a plurality of information based on the timing at which the operating means is operated. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the information displayed by the information display executing means is obtained from a plurality of pieces of information based on the timing at which the operating means is operated. Since it is determined by the information determining means, there is an effect that the selected information can be configured in various ways.
<Characteristic B group>
A dynamic display means for executing the hit / fail determination, a display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the hit / fail determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition. The display executing means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the identification indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine having a specific game executing means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player based on the information displayed on the display means, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the privilege are given to the player. When it is determined by the privilege granting means to be granted, the privilege granting determining means for determining whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege granting determining means, the privilege is granted. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a privilege granting execution means for granting a privilege to the privilege granting means on condition that the player operates the operating means.

According to the gaming machine B1, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is determined by the privilege granting determining means. When it is determined that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting determining means, the privilege granting means is made to grant the privilege on condition that the player operates the operating means. As a result, the timing at which the privilege is granted can be determined by the operation of the player, so that the player can be more involved in the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine B1, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a gaming area by the operation of a player, an entry port into which a gaming ball launched into the gaming area by the launching means can enter, and an entry port thereof. It has a detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the ball, and a launch determination means for determining whether or not the game ball has been launched by the launch means. Based on the detection, the winning / failing determination is executed, and the privilege granting determination means determines whether or not the privilege is granted by executing a predetermined lottery, and the privilege granting determination means. It has a probability setting means for setting a lottery probability for determining that the privilege is to be granted for the predetermined lottery executed by the grant determination means, and the probability setting means is said to have launched a game ball by the launch determination means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, when it is determined, the lottery probability for determining that the privilege is to be granted is set higher than when the gaming ball is not fired.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, the game ball is launched toward the game area by the launching means by the operation of the player. The detection means detects that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball launched into the game area by the launching means can enter. Whether or not the game ball is being fired by the launching means is counterbelled by the firing discriminating means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection means, the hit / fail determination means executes the hit / fail determination. As the privilege granting determination means, whether or not the privilege is granted by executing a predetermined lottery is determined by the privilege granting means. For a predetermined lottery executed by the privilege granting determination means, the lottery probability for determining to grant the privilege is set by the probability setting means. When it is determined by the firing determination means that the game ball has been fired, the lottery probability for determining that the privilege is to be given is set higher by the probability setting means than when the game ball is not fired. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is firing the game ball to be given a privilege other than the specific game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can shoot the game ball to play the game.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, based on the operation of the operating means, the effect mode is displayed on the display means regardless of whether or not the dynamic display mode of the identification information is dynamically displayed. The display executing means is provided, and the privilege granting determining means satisfies a predetermined condition that is satisfied by operating the operating means when the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display executing means. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the privilege is granted.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the operation of the operating means, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display executing means regardless of whether or not the dynamic display mode of the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display execution means, whether or not the privilege is granted is determined by the privilege grant determination means based on the fact that a predetermined condition that is satisfied by operating the operation means is satisfied. Is determined by. As a result, even when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect can be enjoyed by operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed in various ways.

The gaming machine B3 has a partition means for partitioning the display area of the display means into a first display area in which the dynamic display mode of the identification information is displayed and a second display area in which the effect mode is displayed. The gaming machine B4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the display area of the display means is divided into a first display area in which the dynamic display mode of the identification information is displayed and a second display area in which the effect mode is displayed. Is partitioned by the partitioning means, so that there is an effect that the identification information and the effect mode can be easily distinguished.
<Characteristic C group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an identification means that identifies that the operation means has been operated, a display means that can display the effect mode, and an effect mode displayed on the display means are identified by the identification means. In a gaming machine having an effect variable means that is variable based on the result, a period for determining a period from the identification that the operating means has been operated by the identification means to the next identification that the operating means has been operated. When the effect variable execution means for varying the effect mode by the effect variable means and the effect variable execution means for varying the effect mode based on the identification of the discriminating means and the operation means being operated, the effect mode can be changed. When the effect determining means for determining the effect mode to be variably displayed and the effect determining means determine the effect mode, if the period determination means determines that the effect is within a predetermined period, the period is out of the predetermined period. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a determination variable means that facilitates determination of a specific effect mode that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is identified by the identification means that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. The effect mode displayed on the display means capable of displaying the effect mode is changed by the effect variable means based on the identification result by the identification means. After it is identified that the operating means has been operated by the identifying means, the period until the next identification that the operating means has been operated is determined by the period determining means. Based on the identification that the operation means has been operated, the effect mode is changed by the effect variable execution means by the effect variable means. When the effect mode is changed by the effect variable execution means, the effect mode to be variably displayed is determined by the effect determination means. When the effect determining means determines the effect mode, if it is determined by the period determination means that the effect is within the predetermined period, the specific effect mode that is more advantageous to the player than the case outside the predetermined period is the determination variable means. Makes it easier to determine. Thereby, the operation method of the player can be discriminated by the period discriminating means, and it is possible to easily determine the specific effect as long as the period can be determined to be the correct operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means can be increased and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C1, the identification means detects that the operating means has approached a predetermined range, and the display means displays an operation notification mode for notifying a method of operating the operating means. The predetermined period is set to a period during which it is determined that the player has operated by the identification means when the player operates by the method notified in the operation notification mode. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, the identification means detects that the operating means has approached a predetermined range. In the display means, the method of operating the operating means is notified by the operation notification mode. When the player operates by the method notified in the operation notification mode, a predetermined period is set as a period determined to be operated by the identification means. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize how to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game cannot be played without knowing the operation method.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the predetermined period is set for a plurality of periods, and when the identification means identifies that the signal has been received, which period of the plurality of periods is set. The determination variable means is characterized in that the ratio at which the specific effect mode is determined is variably set based on the period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined period is set for a plurality of periods. When the discriminating means discriminates that the signal has been received, the period discriminating means determines which of the plurality of periods the period discriminating means is. Based on the period determined by the period determination means, the ratio at which the specific effect mode is determined is variably set by the determination variable means. As a result, since the ratio of determining the specific effect mode is variable depending on the method of operating the operating means, it becomes easy for the player to determine different results, and there is an effect that the game can be more enjoyed.
<Characteristic D group>
An acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information indicating a determination result by the win / fail determination means. The display means for displaying the above, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a predetermined result are the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the display in It has a notification means for notifying the player of the determination information, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that the determination information can be notified by the notification means based on the player operating the operation means. The gaming machine D1 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D1, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition conditions. The winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means. The identification information indicating the determination result by the pass / fail determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a predetermined result, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Judgment information based on the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means is notified to the player by the notification means. Based on the player operating the operation means, the privilege that the determination information can be notified by the notification means is given by the privilege giving means. As a result, since the determination information is notified based on the operation of the player, the player can know the determination information before it is displayed as the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine D1, the storage means for storing the lottery information until the winning / failing determination result corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is displayed by the identification information, and the lottery information stored in the storage means are the winning / failing. The notification means has a preliminary hit / fail determination means for determining the hit / fail before the hit / fail determination by the determination means, and the notification means notifies the advance determination information determined by the prior hit / fail determination means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the granting determination means determines to notify the determination information together with the prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine D2, the lottery information is stored by the storage means until the winning / failing determination result corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is displayed by the identification information. The lottery information stored in the storage means is determined by the pre-win / fail determination means before the win / fail determination is made by the hit / fail determination means. The pre-judgment information determined by the pre-hit / fail determination means is notified. It is determined by the privilege grant determination means that the determination information and the prior determination information are notified together. Therefore, since the winning / failing determination result for a large amount of lottery information can be notified by the operation of the player, there is an effect that the motivation of the player to operate the operating means can be increased.
<Characteristic E group>
The display means for displaying the effect mode, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the identification means for identifying that the operation means has been operated, and the effect mode can be changed based on the identification result by the identification means. In a gaming machine having an effect variable means for causing the display means and an effect mode determining means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes to be displayed on the display means, the plurality of effect modes have a predetermined period of time. In the meantime, the operation effect mode for notifying the player that the operation means is operated so as to be identified as being operated by the identification means is included, and when the operation effect mode is determined, the operation effect mode is determined. The operation means is operated before the predetermined period by the period determination means for determining whether the period determined by the identification means to be operated is within the predetermined period and the period determination means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a period changing means for setting a start time of the predetermined period earlier when it is determined to be the case.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. The identification means identifies that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. The effect mode is changed by the effect variable means based on the identification result by the identification means. As an effect mode to be displayed on the display means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from a plurality of effect modes. The plurality of effect modes include an operation effect mode for notifying the player that the operation means is operated so as to be identified as being operated by the identification means for a predetermined period, and the operation effect mode is determined. In this case, the period determination means determines whether the period determined to be operated by the identification means is identified within a predetermined period. When it is determined by the period determining means that the operating means has been operated before the predetermined period, the start time of the predetermined period is set earlier by the period changing means. As a result, even if the operating means is operated before a predetermined period, it is possible to suppress a problem that the operation becomes useless. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means, there is an effect that the trouble of getting tired of the game can be suppressed without changing the effect mode.

In the gaming machine E1, when the start time is set earlier by the notification means for notifying the start notification mode indicating the start of the predetermined period and the period changing means based on the start timing of the predetermined period. The gaming machine E2, characterized in that it has a prohibition means for prohibiting notification by the notification means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start timing of the predetermined period, the start notification mode indicating the start of the predetermined period is notified by the notification means. If the start time is set earlier by the period changing means, the notification by the notification means is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, even though the player is operating the operating means, the notification that the predetermined period starts is notified, so that there is an effect that the problem that the player is confused can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, the notification means is the predetermined period when it is identified by the identification means that the operation means is not operated even after the start notification mode is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it notifies a period notification mode indicating that.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, if it is identified by the identification means that the operating means is not operated even after the notification means has notified the start notification mode, a predetermined period of time is provided. Since the period notification mode indicating that the above is the case is notified by the notification means, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the predetermined period in an easy-to-understand manner and the operating means can be further operated to play the game.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operating means to change the production of the game. Has been done.
In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is a machine that executes a lottery that changes the effect of the game when the operation means is operated in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741).
In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage by using an operating means.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, an identification means that identifies that the operation means has been operated, and a display means that can display the effect mode. , The effect variable means for varying the effect mode displayed on the display means based on the identification result by the identification means, and after it is identified by the identification means that the operation means has been operated, the operation means is then operated. A period determining means for determining the period until it is identified that the operation means has been operated, an effect variable execution means for varying the effect mode by the effect variable means based on the identification that the operation means has been operated, and an effect thereof. When the effect mode is changed by the variable execution means, the effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be variably displayed, and when the effect determination means determines the effect mode, the period determination means within a predetermined period. If it is determined to be, it has a determination variable means that makes it easier to determine a specific effect mode that is more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is outside the predetermined period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the identification means detects that the operating means has approached a predetermined range, and the display means has the operation. An operation notification mode for notifying the method of operating the means is displayed, and the predetermined period is a period determined to be operated by the identification means when the player operates by the method notified by the operation notification mode. It is set.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is identified by the identification means that the operating means that can be operated by the player is operated. The effect mode displayed on the display means capable of displaying the effect mode is changed by the effect variable means based on the identification result by the identification means.
After it is identified that the operating means has been operated by the identifying means, the period until the next identification that the operating means has been operated is determined by the period determining means. Based on the identification that the operation means has been operated, the effect mode is changed by the effect variable execution means by the effect variable means. When the effect mode is changed by the effect variable execution means, the effect mode to be variably displayed is determined by the effect determination means.
When the effect determining means determines the effect mode, if it is determined by the period determination means that the effect is within the predetermined period, the specific effect mode that is more advantageous to the player than the case outside the predetermined period is the determination variable means. Makes it easier to determine.
Thereby, the operation method of the player can be discriminated by the period discriminating means, and it is possible to easily determine the specific effect as long as the period can be determined to be the correct operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means can be increased and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the identification means detects that the operating means has approached a predetermined range. In the display means, the method of operating the operating means is notified by the operation notification mode. When the player operates by the method notified in the operation notification mode, a predetermined period is set as a period determined to be operated by the identification means.
This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize how to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game cannot be played without knowing the operation method.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
64 Starting port (entrance port)
81 Third symbol display device (display means )
112a ball launch unit (launching means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means)
S208 Various switches (detection means)
S305 Judgment means S307, S309 Dynamic display mode determination means

Claims (1)

Judgment means to execute the judgment and
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
A dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means,
A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and a dynamic display mode determining means.
In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a predetermined result is displayed on the display means.
In the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed and outside the predetermined specific period, the first effect is executed in which the execution is stopped during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The second effect, in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed and is within the predetermined specific period, the execution is continued during the period when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The production execution means to be executed and
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
During the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, the operation of the operating means when the second effect is executed causes the identification information executed thereafter to be dynamically displayed. It has a setting means for setting to be reflected in the game during a certain period of time .
The operation display mode is displayed on the display means based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means.
In the operation display mode, setting display information that can be selected corresponding to the operation of the operation means can be notified.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting means is set based on the operation of the operating means during the period in which the setting display information is displayed on the display means .

Images